`
RAM PROMASTER
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon
itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................6
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................10
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................39
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................52
5MULTIMEDIA .................................................................................................................................78
6SAFETY ..........................................................................................................................................131
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................167
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................185
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................232
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................239
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................243
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................7
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............7
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................7
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 10
Key Fob .............................................................10
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 11
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 12
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 13
To Arm The System ..........................................13
To Disarm The System .....................................13
Rearming Of The System .................................13
Security System Manual Override...................13
DOORS ................................................................... 13
Power Door Locks ............................................13
Auto Unlock Doors............................................14
Automatic Door Locks......................................14
Auto-Lock Feature — If Equipped ....................14
STEERING WHEEL.................................................. 15
Telescoping Steering Column..........................15
SEATS...................................................................... 16
Manual Adjustments........................................16
Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................19
Fold Down Tray — If Equipped .........................20
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped .................20
Head Restraints ...............................................20
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION.........................21
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................21
Basic Voice Commands ...................................22
Get Started .......................................................22
Additional Information .....................................22
MIRRORS ...............................................................22
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................22
Outside Mirrors ................................................23
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................24
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped... 24
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..........................25
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................25
Multifunction Lever .........................................25
Headlights ........................................................25
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .......................................................25
High/Low Beam Switch ...................................26
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................26
Parking Lights ..................................................26
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ..................26
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................26
Turn Signals......................................................26
Lane Change Assist..........................................26
Battery Saver....................................................26
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................27
Courtesy Lights.................................................27
Illuminated Entry ..............................................29
WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................................29
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................29
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 30
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................30
Additional Rear Climate Control —
If Equipped .......................................................32
Operating Tips ..................................................32
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 33
Storage .............................................................33
USB/AUX Control — If Equipped .....................34
Power Outlets ...................................................35
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped.....................36
WINDOWS ............................................................. 36
Power Windows ...............................................36
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped ..................37
Wind Buffeting .................................................37
HOOD....................................................................... 38
Opening.............................................................38
Closing ..............................................................38
CARGO AREA FEATURES...................................... 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 39
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................40
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 40
Location And Controls......................................41
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ....................41
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Display Setup Menu.........................................42
Values Displayed ..............................................42
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)...........................................................43
TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 43
Trip Button ........................................................43
Trip Functions...................................................44
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 44
Red Warning Lights ..........................................44
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................46
Yellow Indicator Lights .....................................49
Green Indicator Lights......................................49
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................50
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 50
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................50
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 51
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 52
Automatic Transmission ..................................52
Normal Starting ................................................52
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...............................52
If Engine Fails To Start .....................................52
After Starting.....................................................53
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........... 53
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..........53
PARKING BRAKE ...................................................53
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...............................54
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............................55
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .............................................................55
6-Speed Automatic Transmission ...................55
POWER STEERING ................................................60
Power Steering Fluid Check ............................60
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ......................60
To Activate ........................................................61
To Set A Desired Speed ...................................61
To Vary The Speed Setting...............................61
To Accelerate For Passing ...............................61
To Resume Speed............................................62
To Deactivate....................................................62
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................62
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .............62
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts .................63
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ........................................................64
Cleaning The ParkSense System ....................64
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions.......................................................64
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................65
REFUELING THE VEHICLE......................................66
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .......................67
VEHICLE LOADING................................................. 67
Vehicle Certification Label...............................67
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .............67
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..................67
Tire Size ............................................................67
Rim Size............................................................67
Inflation Pressure.............................................67
Curb Weight......................................................68
Overloading ......................................................68
Loading .............................................................68
TRAILER TOWING .................................................. 68
Common Towing Definitions............................68
Trailer Hitch Classification...............................70
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ................................................71
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............................71
Towing Requirements .....................................71
Towing Tips ......................................................74
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ....................................... 75
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle....75
Recreational Towing ........................................75
DRIVING TIPS ......................................................... 76
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........................76
Driving Through Water ....................................76
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................... 78
CYBERSECURITY ................................................... 78
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 79
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings.............................79
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.................................. 88
Identifying Your Radio......................................88
Safety And General Information......................90
UCONNECT MODES ............................................... 91
Radio Mode ......................................................91
Media Mode......................................................98
Phone Mode ................................................. 100
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED..................111
Operating Navigation Mode —
If Equipped..................................................... 111
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .............128
Radio Operation ............................................ 128
Player Operation............................................ 128
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED......................129
Ram Telematics General Information.......... 129
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......130
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 130
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................131
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...................... 131
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 132
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 136
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................... 136
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 139
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).... 143
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 145
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 145
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 145
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 146
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 152
Child Restraints............................................. 159
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 163
Transporting Passengers.............................. 163
Transporting Pets ......................................... 164
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 164
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 165
Exhaust Gas................................................... 166
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 166
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 167
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ......................... 167
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 167
Jack Location................................................. 168
Spare Tire Removal....................................... 169
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 170
Wheel Covers................................................. 173
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED.....................173
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 174
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation ..174
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions.............. 174
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.............. 176
JUMP STARTING ..................................................178
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 179
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 179
Battery Location ............................................ 180
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................181
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............................181
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................182
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................183
Automatic Transmission ............................... 184
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...................................................................184
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................184
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................185
Maintenance Plan......................................... 186
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................189
3.6L Engine .................................................. 189
Checking Oil Level......................................... 190
Adding Washer Fluid..................................... 190
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 191
Pressure Washing ......................................... 191
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................191
Engine Oil....................................................... 192
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 192
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 192
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 193
Body Lubrication............................................ 194
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 195
Exhaust System ............................................ 195
Cooling System.............................................. 196
Brake System ............................................... 199
Automatic Transmission ............................... 199
Fuses.............................................................. 200
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 206
TIRES ....................................................................210
Tire Safety Information ................................ 210
Tires — General Information ........................ 219
Tire Types....................................................... 222
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 223
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 225
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 226
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 227
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................227
Treadwear...................................................... 227
Traction Grades............................................. 228
Temperature Grades..................................... 228
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................228
BODYWORK ......................................................... 228
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 228
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 229
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 229
INTERIORS .......................................................... 230
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 230
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 230
Leather Surfaces........................................... 231
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 231
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders ...231
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)........ 232
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 232
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.. 232
Torque Specifications ................................... 232
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 233
3.6L Engine ................................................... 233
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 234
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 234
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 234
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ....234
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 235
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 235
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 235
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 236
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 237
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 238
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................239
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 239
Prepare A List ................................................ 239
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 239
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................239
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 239
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 239
Mexico............................................................ 240
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 240
Service Contract ........................................... 240
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................241
MOPAR® PARTS ................................................241
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................241
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 241
In Canada ...................................................... 241
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................241
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................242
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer
case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in
the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles
produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information,
contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. For any
additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer to the
Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol
Ú page 44.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW:
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE:
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 44
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 44
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 44
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 45
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 45
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 45
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 45
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 45
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 46
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 46
Yellow Warning Lights
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
Ú page 46
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 46
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
Ú page 47
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 48
Red Warning Lights
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 48
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 48
Generic Warning Light
Ú page 49
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 49
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Yellow Warning Lights
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 49
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Cruise Control Indicator Light
Ú page 49
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 50
1
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system which
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). The key fob
allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains
an integrated mechanical key, which can be used
by pushing the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing
key code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the
authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks.
These numbers can be used to order duplicate
keys.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal
Ú page 242.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
To lock all of the doors, push and release the lock
button once. Push and release the unlock button
on key fob once to unlock only the front doors.
Push and release the cargo unlock button on key
fob once to unlock the cargo area (rear lateral
sliding doors and rear door). The doors can also be
locked and unlocked manually by using the
mechanical key.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals
will flash and the horn will chirp (if activated
through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 79). If a
door is open when the lock button is pushed, the
turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate to
indicate that a door is still open.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and
release the mechanical key to access the
battery case screw located on the side of the
key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key
fob using a small screwdriver.
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and
replace the battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and
turn the screw to lock it into place.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
authorized dealer replacement of keys.
NOTE:
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other
vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses ignition keys which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can
be used to start and operate the vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is
turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle
Ú page 242.
IGNITION SWITCH
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical ignition
switch.
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove
the key fobs from vehicle, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
Opening the driver's door when the key is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is STOP
(OFF/LOCK) sounds a signal to remove the key.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.
When the Vehicle Security system is activated,
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The
system provides both audible and visible signals.
For the first three minutes, the horn will sound, and
the turn signal lights will flash. For an additional
15 minutes, only the turn signal lights will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
To arm the system, the Vehicle Security system will
set when you use the key fob to lock the doors. If a
door or the hood is not properly shut, the system
will not be armed.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the
system.
The Vehicle Security system will also disarm if a
programmed Sentry Key is inserted into the
ignition switch. To exit the alarming mode, push
the key fob unlock button, or insert a programmed
Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of turn lamps flashing. If the
condition which initiated the alarm is still present,
the system will ignore that condition and monitor
the remaining doors and ignition.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm/disarm if
you lock/unlock the doors using the manual door
lock.
DOORS
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The central lock/unlock button has an LED that
indicates whether the doors are locked or
unlocked.
LED ON: Doors locked. Push the right side of the
central lock/unlock button once again to
centrally unlock all doors. The LED will switch
off.
LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the left side of
the central lock/unlock button again to centrally
lock all doors. The doors will be locked only if all
the doors are properly closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob,
it will no longer be possible to unlock them by
pushing the central lock/unlock button.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the detent.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The load compartment power door lock switch is
located on the driver door trim panel. Use this
switch to lock or unlock the load compartment
doors.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
AUTO UNLOCK DOORS
This feature unlocks all front doors when one front
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the rear or side door is open, only the rear or side
door is unlocked.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
be enabled or disabled through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 79.
AUTO-LOCK FEATURE — IF EQUIPPED
Delivery vehicles may be equipped with the
Auto-Lock feature to keep packages safe when the
driver exits the vehicle. When enabled, all vehicle
doors will automatically lock after 10 seconds
when the doors are all closed after any door (front,
sliding, or rear cargo door) had been opened.
NOTE:
To avoid locking the vehicle keys inside, be sure
to remove the keys from inside the vehicle
before closing the doors when this feature is
enabled.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from
vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all of
the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Equipped vehicles will automatically activate
the Auto-Lock feature when the odometer
reaches 75 miles. An ignition cycle is not
required to complete activation.
To enable this feature, close all vehicle doors and
proceed as follows:
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN),
engine not running, position.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the O (off)
position.
3. Pull the multifunction lever all the way
rearward toward the driver, and release.
4. Push the lock button on the driver’s side door
panel. The indicator light will illuminate to
show the doors are locked.
Push To Lock
5. Push the unlock button on the driver’s side
door panel to unlock the doors.
Push To Unlock
6. Push the lock button on the instrument panel.
The indicator light will illuminate to show the
doors are locked.
Lock Button On Instrument Panel
7. Push the lock button on the instrument panel
a second time to unlock the doors.
8. Pull the multifunction lever all the way
rearward toward the driver, and release.
9. Place the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
To verify the procedure is complete, place the
ignition in the AVV (START) position, then back to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, and remove the key
from the ignition. Open, then close the front
driver’s door. After 10 seconds, the vehicle doors
will lock.
NOTE:
To disable the Auto-Lock feature, repeat this
procedure in order.
STEERING WHEEL
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control
handle up. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle down until fully
engaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward/rearward and reclined. Front and rear
height and lumbar can also be adjusted (if
equipped).
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat
is in the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Driver’s Seat
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Lumbar Knob
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Height Adjustment
Without Swivel Seat
The height adjustment levers are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the
front lever to adjust the front of the seat, or lift up
on the rear lever to adjust the rear of the seat.
To raise the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while none or minimal weight
is applied to the seat.
To lower the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while seated or applying
weight to the seat.
Height Adjustment Levers
With Swivel Seat
The height adjustment knobs are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front
knob to adjust the front of the seat up or down.
Rotate the rear knob to adjust the rear of the seat
up or down.
Height Adjustment Knobs
Recliner Adjustment
Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seatback, lean back, rotate
the knob rearward to position the seatback as
desired. To return the seatback to its normal
upright position, lean forward, rotate the knob
forward until the seatback is in the upright
position.
Recliner Knob
1 — Front Height Adjustment Lever
2 — Rear Height Adjustment Lever
1 — Front Height Adjustment Knob
2 — Rear Height Adjustment Knob
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front
outboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback,
lean forward slightly, pull the lever outward, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever.
To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward and pull the lever outward.
Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Recliner Lever
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of
the driver's seatback. Rotate the control forward to
increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Suspension Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring
system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure
maximum comfort and safety. The system of
springs also effectively absorbs impact from
uneven road surfaces.
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob, located on the
inboard side of the seat, to set the required setting
based on body weight, with settings between 88 lb
(40 kg) and 286 lb (130 kg).
Weight Adjustment Knob
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front
inboard side of the seat. The seat may be turned
through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side
and approximately 35° toward the door. The seat
may be locked in the driving position or at the
180° position. To swivel the seat, pull the swivel
seat inboard lever outward, turn the seat to the
desired position and release the lever.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision, you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
Swivel Seat Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel
seats, the seats must be locked in the facing
forward position while driving. If the seats are not
in the correct position, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked
in the facing forward position before the first
vehicle movement, shifting out of park is not
allowed until the seats are both locked in the
facing forward position. When the seats are not in
the right position and the first vehicle movement
after ignition START is attempted, a chime and a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Rotate and lock the swivel seats in the
correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked
in the facing forward position during movement of
the vehicle, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and an intermittent
chime will sound until key-off or until the swivel
seats are locked in the facing forward position.
Stop and move the swivel seats in the correct
position before proceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not
possible to check the correct position of the swivel
seats, a message and the generic warning light
appears in the instrument cluster display to inform
about the failure. In these conditions, check the
status of the swivel seats and do not drive the
vehicle until the swivel seats are locked in the
facing forward position.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front driver and passenger
seats may be equipped with heaters in both the
seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the
front heated seats are located on the lower
outboard side of the seat.
Heated Seat Switch
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.
Push the switch a second time to shut the heating
elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
FOLD DOWN TRAY — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the
seat is equipped with a fold-down tray that can be
used as a document support surface. To use the
fold-down tray, grab the pull tab and lower the tray.
Lowering The Fold-Down Tray
The fold-down tray is equipped with two cup holders
and a support surface with a paper holder clip.
Closing The Fold-Down Tray
ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS — IF EQUIPPED
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and
adjusted for height. Underneath the front of the
armrest is the adjuster wheel which will adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust
the height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the reinstallation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 242.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
1 — Push To Mute
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, And Navigation
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/
off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control to
access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Pan (if equipped)
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective when
driving in the following conditions:
Nighttime in low light applications
Bad weather conditions (e.g. extreme haze,
snow/slush)
If it becomes difficult to see clearly in the display,
the camera may need to be cleaned. If snow, ice,
mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Camera Location
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be folded
forward or rearward to avoid damage. The hinges
have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver’s side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the
left upper, left lower, right upper or right lower
mirror positions indicated by one of the four arrows
on the switch. Tilt the control knob in the direction
you want the mirror to move. When you are
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center O (off) position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a power blind spot
mirror, you can adjust them when the control knob
is positioned to the lower arrows.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
on the driver’s door panel below the power mirror
controls. Push the switch to the right and the
mirrors will fold in, push the switch to the left and
the mirrors will return to the normal driving
position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
The power folding mirrors are designed to be
folded and unfolded using the power folding
switch. If the mirrors are manually folded, the
mirror head may appear loose.
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount
of play, the mirror should be power folded closed,
then power folded open (this may require multiple
button pushes).
NOTE:
The intended use of the power fold mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors.
Only manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by
accidental impact. In this case it is possible to
restore to position both ways, manually and
electrically (as described above).
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 30.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position. When
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
taillights, license plate light, clearance lights and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
lever back to the O (off) position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on
whenever the ignition is in the ON position, the
headlight switch is off, and a turn signal has not
been activated.
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRLs.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
CAUTION!
Leaving the mirror in a non-powered position,
accidental impact or manual fold, may cause
permanent damage to the mirror. Electrically
restore the mirror to its normal position, as soon
as practical.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
With the low beams activated, pull the
multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to
turn on the high beams. The High Beam Indicator
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to
indicated that the high beams are on. Pull the
multifunction lever a second time to switch the
headlights back to low beam. When the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, both the high and low
beams will turn off.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can be turned on, with the ignition key
in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or removed, by
moving the end of the multifunction lever to O (off)
position and then to the headlight position.
The indicator light in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
FOLLOW ME HOME/HEADLIGHT DELAY
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time after the engine is turned off.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction
lever toward the steering wheel within two
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the
activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
The indicator light on the instrument panel will light
up and the corresponding message will appear in
the instrument cluster display for as long as the
function is activated. The indicator light comes on
when the lever is operated and stays on until the
function is automatically deactivated. Each
movement of the lever only increases the amount
of time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just below the climate
controls.
Push the switch once to turn the fog
lights on. Push the switch a second time
to turn the fog lights off.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog lights
will also turn off.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will
flash to show proper operation of the turn signals.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, when
the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
These lights are mounted between the sun visors
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by
pushing the corresponding switch.
Courtesy Lights
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (off/left position, center position, on/
right position). Using the switch on the bottom of
the overhead console:
Push the switch to the on/right position from its
center position and the lights are always on.
Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console control the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch on the right
to turn the right light on; push again to turn off.
Push the switch on the left to turn the left light on;
push again to turn off.
Rear Lights
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Cargo
Lamp located at the upper rear cargo area above
the rear doors.
Rear Cargo Lamp Location
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a Side
Cargo Lamp located at the upper rear area of the
passenger side sliding door opening.
1 — Ambient Light
2 — Left Map Light
3 — Off/Left Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Right Map Light
6 — On/Right Position
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights
are off to avoid draining the battery.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Side Cargo Lamp Location
The Rear and Side Cargo Lamps can be set to three
different positions by pushing the lens to the right,
left, or center positions.
Push the lens to the right from its center posi-
tion and the lamp is always off.
Leave the lens in the center position, and the
lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed.
Push the lens to the left from its center position
and the lamp is always on.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a cargo
lamp on the center of the ceiling of the cargo area.
Ceiling Cargo Lamp
The Ceiling Cargo Lamp can be set to three
different positions (off/left position, center
position, on/right position).
Push the switch to the left from its center posi-
tion and the lamp is always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed.
Push the switch to the right from its center posi-
tion and the lamp is always on.
NOTE:
If the ignition is placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position, the lamp will stay on for about
15 minutes and then time out.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of
the instrument panel below the instrument cluster
display.
Dimmer Controls
Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or
decrease the brightness of the instrument panel
lights, cupholder lights, and footwell lights, as long
as the headlights are turned on.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the
dome lamp. The ambient light will be on all the
time, with the option of dimming it with the dimmer
controls as long as the headlights are turned on.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Ambient LED Lighting — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with LED lighting in
the front footwells and center cup holders. The
brightness of the lights can be adjusted using the
dimmer controls, located on the left side of the
instrument panel, as long as the headlights are
turned on.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door. They
also turn on when unlocking or opening manually
from the driver door cylinder.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once
the ignition switch is changed to the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position from the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
NOTE:
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer
control is in the “Dome ON” position.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. There are five
different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can
be raised or lowered to access the modes.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Intermittent Wipers
Push the lever downward to the first detent and
rotate the center ring to use one of the four
intermittent wiper settings when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable.
Push the lever downward to the second detent,
and the wipers will operate at low speed. Push the
lever downward to the third detent, and the wipers
will operate at high speed.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/
washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate.
The wipers will activate automatically for three
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for three cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see
Ú page 195.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Manual Climate
Controls
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a
series of three outer rotary dials (blower speed,
temperature and mode) and three inner push
buttons (Recirculation, A/C, Rear Window
Defroster).
A/C Button — If Equipped
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost position. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is ON. The rear window defroster
automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn
the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds
available. The blower speed increases
as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may
be equipped with four blower speeds.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to change
the airflow distribution mode. The
airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vents to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the
blower control knob to the O (off)
position.
ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL —
I
F EQUIPPED
These switches, mounted on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column, activate the
additional rear heating/air conditioning system.
NOTE:
These switches must be enabled for operation by
the Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Controls Switches
Rear Blower Control
Push this button to turn on the rear
climate controls. An indicator light will turn
on when the rear climate control is on.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button
To change the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle, push temperature control
up button to raise the temperature.
Rear Passenger Temperature Down
Button To change the temperature in
the rear of the vehicle, push
temperature control down button to
lower the temperature.
Rear MODE Button
Push this button to change the air
distribution mode for the rear
passengers.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
and 50% water is recommended
Ú page 237.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
Ú page 228.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and
snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartments
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set the
mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn on
(A/C) to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Dash Storage
Dashboard Clipboard
Located on top of the dashboard is a clipboard and
two storage bins on each side of the clipboard.
Clipboard And Storage Bins
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped
A storage tray is located under the driver’s seat. To
remove the tray, lift up on the tray to withdraw it
from the hooks on the support base, then slide the
tray out from under the seat.
Underseat Storage Tray
USB/AUX CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Port and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel left of the radio (driver’s lower
right). This feature allows an external USB device
to be plugged into the USB port.
AUX Jack And USB Ports
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to
connect an external USB device to the vehicle's
USB charging port which is located next to the
power outlet and near the cup holder on the
passenger side.
NOTE:
If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — Passenger Compartment USB Charging Port
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The power outlet is located on the instrument
panel passenger compartment near the cup
holder. It only operates with the ignition in the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
Load Compartment Power Outlet — If Equipped
The load compartment power outlet is located in
the rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be is
used for powering 12 Volt adapter accessories and
recharging communications devices.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by
using unsuitable adapters.
Power Outlet Fuses — Under Hood
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
1 — F14 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary
switches located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering column which can be used to
power various electronic devices. Connections to
the switches are found in the right central pillar
fuse panel at the base of the passenger side
B-pillar.
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant battery
feed, while Auxiliary Switch 2 is configured to
ignition feed.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s
Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and
choosing the appropriate links.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The control on the left front door panel has
switches that control all power windows. There is a
single opening and closing switch on the front
passenger door for passenger window control.
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes
after the ignition is placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position. This feature is cancelled when either
front door is opened.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for
half a second, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the auto-down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, lift the window
switch to the detent for less than half a second and
release it to stop the window.
WINDOW BAR GRATES — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part
of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to
protect you and your passengers in the event of an
accident.
Window Bar Grates
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door windows
are designed to protect you in the event of an
accident. Modification or removal of the grates
could lead to serious injury or death.
2
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into
the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the right to
release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in
hood slot to secure the hood in the open position.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
CLOSING
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The cargo area may be equipped with different
options such as optional side panels, rear seats
and an optional floor.
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in closed
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop
rod is fully seated into its storage retaining
clips.
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows instrument cluster display
messages
Ú page 40.
Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
US Federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the
vehicle has been driven. If your odometer
needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service.
If the technician cannot do so, then the odom-
eter must be set at zero, and a sticker must be
placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so
that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero.
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
The gear selector status “P,R,N,D,1,2,3,4,5,6”
are displayed indicating the gear selector posi-
tion. Telltales “1,2,3,4,5,6” indicate the manual
mode has been engaged and the gear selected
is displayed
Ú page 54.
3. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000). Before the
pointer reaches the red area, ease up on
the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located
Ú page 66.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 41
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display
This system allows the driver to select a variety of
useful information by pushing the switches
mounted on the instrument panel. Examples of
menu items are:
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Exit Menu
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some
customer programmable features will display in
the radio
Ú page 79.
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column:
Display Control Buttons
NOTE:
The
MODE button must be pushed prior to pressing
the
up and down arrow buttons.
MODE Button:
Push and hold the
MODE button for a time
longer than one second to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the
MODE
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Up and Down Arrow Buttons:
Push and release the
up and down arrow
buttons to scroll upward and downward through
the main menu and submenus or adjust the illu-
mination on the instrument panel when the
headlights are on.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily,
push and release the
MODE button. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY SETUP MENU
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a cycle. Push and release the
up or
down arrow button to access the different
options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the
MODE button. Single pushes on the up or
down arrow button will scroll through the
setup menu options. The menu items include the
following functions:
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR
Disable Made By CHR Service)
Exit menu
NOTE:
If equipped, some customer programmable
features will display in the Uconnect system. Refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the
MODE
button to
select the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the
MODE button to
store the new setting and go back to the main
menu option previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the
MODE
button to
display the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all
the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the
MODE button to
select the displayed submenu option and to
open the relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the
up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new
setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the
MODE button to
store the new setting and go back to the
previously selected submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the
MODE button to
return to the main menu (short hold) or the
main screen (longer hold).
VALUES DISPLAYED
NOTE:
All of the following items are accessed by pressing
the
TRIP button.
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled
with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that
driving conditions will not change. The message
“----” will appear on the display in the following
cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
engine running.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 43
NOTE:
The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load,
tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into
account the above notes.
Travel Distance
This value shows the distance covered since the
last reset.
Average Fuel Consumption
This value shows the approximate average
consumption since the last reset.
Current Fuel Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is
constantly updated. The message “----” will appear
on the display if the vehicle is parked with the
engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since the last
reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last
reset.
PERSONAL SETTINGS
(C
USTOMER-PROGRAMMABLE
F
EATURES)
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR
Disable Made By CHR Service)
Exit Menu
NOTE:
If equipped, some customer programmable
features will display in the Uconnect system
Ú page 79.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster. It features a driver interactive display
(displays information such as trip information,
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and
travel time).
NOTE:
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer
display and menus to customize the information
displayed in the cluster
Ú page 79.
TRIP BUTTON
The TRIP button, located on the right steering
column stalk, can be used to display and to reset
the previously described values.
A short button push displays the different
values.
A long button push resets the system and then
starts a new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
Push and hold the
TRIP button to reset the
system manually.
When the “Trip distance” reaches
99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
“Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and
59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets
the system.
NOTE:
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the
screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
will be reset.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the
TRIP button
for over two seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, push the
TRIP button until
all the trip menu items have been displayed and
the display returns to the main menu.
TRIP FUNCTIONS
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of
new trip).
Trip A/Trip B
Trip Distance
Average Fuel Consumption
Average Speed
Travel Time (Driving Time)
NOTE:
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel
Consumption” cannot be reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
and a chime will sound
Ú page 145.
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If it
stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 45
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or
more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
inform of a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature of
the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is
safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 181.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security system has detected an
attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate
if a problem with the system is detected. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 47
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light
The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, and when
ESC is activated. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL)
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD
II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the ABS. The light will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 49
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does
not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will
illuminate if any of the following
conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor Failure, External Light Failure,
Fuel Cut-Off intervention or fail, Parking Sensor
Failure, Dynamic Steering Torque System Failure.
The telltale will remain on fixed in case of swivel
seat failure and on blinking in case of Air Bag
Warning Light Failure. Contact an authorized
dealer immediately for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision Warning
is off.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the FCW System.
Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Ú page 68.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Turn Signal Indicator Light
The turn signal arrows will flash
independently when left or right turn
signals are selected. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever
is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on
Ú page 25.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on
Ú page 25.
Cruise Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is activated
Ú page 60.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light when
the desired speed is set.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
Ú page 78
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 51
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the I/M
test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
3
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
NORMAL STARTING
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position
and release it when the engine starts. If the engine
fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no
more than 15 seconds. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the
ignition key in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
STARTING AND OPERATING 53
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades see
Ú page 237.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 178.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than 25
seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before
trying again.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The parking brake lever is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat. To apply the parking
brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To
release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly,
push the release button with your thumb, then
lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter’n Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
STARTING AND OPERATING 55
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can only
be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in
the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the
transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key
in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature
is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN
mode (engine running or not), and the brake pedal
must be pressed.
NOTE:
Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent
the transmission gear selector from being moved
out of the PARK position. To shift the transmission
out of the PARK position the first time after
cranking is allowed, ensure swivel seats are locked
in the forward facing position.
6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear position display (located in
the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
gear range. You must press the brake pedal to
move the gear selector out of PARK. To drive, move
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
DRIVE position.
The electronically controlled transmission provides
a precise shift schedule. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first
few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Gear Selector
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the ERS shift control. Moving
the gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside
the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays
the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In
ERS mode, toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) will change the highest available gear
Ú page 58.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the
transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
STARTING AND OPERATING 57
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward and to the left until
it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 75.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 183.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range
Ú page 58. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm
Ú page 59. During extremely cold
temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation
may briefly be limited to THIRD gear only. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission remains in THIRD gear
regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
be illuminated. Transmission Limp Home Mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear, but
will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position
(beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode,
moving the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
STARTING AND OPERATING 59
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
selector into the ERS position, then tap it forward
(-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The trans-
mission will shift to the range from which the
vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (SIXTH gear).
The transmission will automatically shift into
Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the acceler-
ator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the
transmission will automatically downshift (for
engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of
driving]. Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control, when the transmission is suffi-
ciently warm, will demonstrate that the trans-
mission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
Instrument
Cluster Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle has not been driven for several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may seem
sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will
not cause damage to the transmission. The
torque converter will refill within five seconds
after starting the engine.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is
lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
these conditions, you will observe a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not
indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short
amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick
fluid in the steering system. This noise should
be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should be
checked at every oil change if a leak is suspected,
abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system
is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate
inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled
fluid from all surfaces
Ú page 238.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h) up to the maximum speed of
100 mph (160 km/h).
The Cruise Control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
the steering fluid temperature and it should be
avoided when possible. Damage to the power
steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
and with the engine off to prevent injury from
moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
reading. Do not overfill. Use only FCA
recommended power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can damage
your power steering components. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
STARTING AND OPERATING 61
Cruise Control Lever
TO ACTIVATE
Rotate the center ring upward on the Cruise
Control lever to turn the system on. The Cruise
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, rotate the center
ring upward a second time. The Cruise Indicator
Light will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, move the Cruise
Control lever upward SET (+) and release. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before moving the Cruise
Control lever upward SET (+).
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by tapping the Cruise Control lever up SET
(+) or decrease the speed by tapping the Cruise
Control lever down (-).
U.S. Speed (mph)
Tapping the Cruise Control lever up SET (+), or
tapping the Cruise Control lever down (-) once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the lever results in an adjust-
ment of 1 mph.
If the lever is continually held up or down, the
set speed will continue to adjust until the lever
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Tapping the Cruise Control lever up SET (+), or
tapping the Cruise Control lever down (-) once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the lever results in an adjust-
ment of 1 km/h.
If the lever is continually held up or down, the
set speed will continue to adjust until the lever
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
While the Cruise Control system is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always ensure the system is off when
you are not using it.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RES
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Cruise Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Rotating the center
ring upward to turn the system off or placing the
ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position erases
the set speed memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
an audible indication of the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver)
Ú page 64.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automatically
activated when the transmission is placed into
REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle behind
the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes
more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle.
The system will be automatically activated as soon
as the trailer is removed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
S
ENSORS
The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors,
located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the
area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in
the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from
the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to
24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear
fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest
obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
that would clear the underside of the vehicle
during the parking maneuver.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
STARTING AND OPERATING 63
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST ALERTS
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to
the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle
is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance
An obstacle is present within the sensors' field of
view
Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable through
personal settings in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 40.
Failure Sensor or System failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed in instrument cluster
display (if equipped).
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
F
AILURE INDICATIONS
A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist
sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE
gear engagement, by the instrument panel
warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a
message is displayed in the instrument
cluster display (if equipped)
Ú page 44.
The sensors and wiring are tested
continuously when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be
disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors
quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside
of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep
the Rear Park Assist system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Rear Park
Assist.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
Rear Park Assist system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not
be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting
a close object as a sensor problem, causing a
failure indication to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
STARTING AND OPERATING 65
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly presence in the sensor field of view. The
filtering operation must be performed only by an
authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE and/or when the rear doors are opened.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
Rear Back Up Camera is located on the top rear of
the vehicle below the center light.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or
when the rear doors are closed, the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the
width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on
the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is used
with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler
NOTE:
During fuel fill, nozzle position could affect the flow
of fuel. For best results, allow the nozzle to rest
naturally in the filler tube - do not raise the handle
to increase the fill angle.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
ties into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
STARTING AND OPERATING 67
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a “Check fuel cap” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 40. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that
the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started. See an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
B-pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the
driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour (MDH) of manufacture
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving
condition can result if either rating is exceeded.
You could lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 STARTING AND OPERATING
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear axle of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose
items securely before driving. If weighing the
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), but the
total load is within the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), you must redistribute the
weight. Improper weight distribution can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and
handles and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 67.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation”
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
STARTING AND OPERATING 69
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 67.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle
and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
(Continued)
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú page 215.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing
Ú page 185. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 210.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and may be required for any
trailer, for example trailers in excess of 2,000 lb
(907 kg). Trailer brake requirements vary by local
law, consult local legal requirements where the
trailer is to be towed for trailer brake require-
ments.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING!
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Tail Lamp
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at
low speeds, holding your vehicle in FIRST gear
(using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control) on more severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Tail Lamp
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
R
ECREATIONAL TOWING
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to buildup between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 3/
3 NAV With 5-inch Display system
Ú page 88.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html (US Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent
Ú page 50.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle,
it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
MULTIMEDIA 79
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
system may also contain the word “TRIP”.
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV SETTINGS
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
The Back Arrow will change into a Done button if
any changes are made.
When making a selection, press the Menu button
on the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release the
preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button to return to the
previous menu, or press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to screen brightness and language displayed on the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “With
Headlights On” setting will increase or decrease the brightness with the
headlight on; the “With Headlights Off” will increase or decrease the
brightness with the headlights off.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the Touchscreen Beep on or off.
Display Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B display on the instrument cluster on or off.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
MULTIMEDIA 81
Voice
Units
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
When set to “Brief”, the system provides a shortened audio description. When
set to “Long”, the system provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display
in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
Safety/Assistance
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Set Time And Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). “Sync Time” must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the date. The selectable options are “Date”,
“Month”, and “Year”. You can also change the clock settings.
Sync Time — If Equipped
This setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS receiver. The system will
control the time via GPS location.
When the Safety/Assistance button is pressed, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending on
the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder;
the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the backup camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera With Rear Door
This setting will activate a message on the touchscreen that will let you know
if the camera is not in the correct position if one of the rear doors is opened.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
MULTIMEDIA 83
Lights — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Setting Name Description
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
Engine Off Options
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h).
Horn w/ Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the key fob’s Lock button is pushed. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn. The “1st Press” setting will sound the
horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
When the Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to vehicle shut off. This setting will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the radio remains on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “0 min” setting will shut the radio off the
moment the vehicle is turned off. The “20 min” setting will leave the radio on
for 20 minutes after the vehicle has been turned off or until one of the doors
has been opened.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
MULTIMEDIA 85
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play music from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble”
ranges of the audio.
Balance
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in
the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker
icon can be moved to set audio location.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a
higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will set how the radio behaves when the ignition
is switched to ON/RUN. The available settings are “On”,
“Off”, and “Recall Last”.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected
through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a
connected device.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Paired Phones/Devices This setting will show which phones are paired to the Phone system.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
MULTIMEDIA 87
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. This setting can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, a pop-up will display asking if you would like to clear all personal data from the system.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that provides the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
1 — Screen Off Button
2 — Mute Button
3 — Back Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
6 — Volume & On/Off Button
7 — Radio Button
8 — Media Button
9 — TRIP/NAV Button
10 — Phone Button
11 — More Button
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
MULTIMEDIA 89
Feature Description
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Back Press the Back button to return to a previous page.
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
Push the Enter/Browse button to accept a highlighted selection on the
screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a
radio station.
More
Push the More button to access additional options such as: “Trip” and “Clock”.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system.
TRIP/NAV
Press the Trip button to access the vehicle’s Trip function. If equipped, press
the NAV button to access Navigation Mode, the system’s built-in navigation
feature.
Media
Press the Media button to enter Media Mode and access controls for external
audio sources.
Radio
Press the Radio button to enter Radio Mode and access the system’s radio
functions.
Volume & On/Off
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button to turn the system on or off.
Mute
Push the Mute button to turn the audio of the radio system off. Press it again
to turn the audio on.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button to turn the screen on or off.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read the manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when it is safe to do
so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is
required, park in a safe location and set the
parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. Return it to an authorized dealer to
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Your system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use your
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
your system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from your system. Besides damage to your
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.)
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 242.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the touchscreen.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
MULTIMEDIA 91
UCONNECT MODES
RADIO MODE
Operating Radio Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/
AM/SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the
Radio mode.
SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF
The screen will switch on/off when the Volume &
On/Off button is pushed.
VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the Volume knob to adjust the volume.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Push the On/Off button to turn the system on or off.
ENTER/BROWSE AND TUNE/SCROLL
CONTROL
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio
station frequency.
SEEK FUNCTIONS
Seek Up And Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the
next available station or channel. If the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through
the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up And Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
advance the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
next available station or channel when the button
on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Preset Buttons
2 — All Presets Button
3 — Radio Band Button (FM/AM/SXM)
4 — Seek Down Button
5 — Direct Tune Button
6 — Info Button
7 — Seek Up Button
8 — Audio Settings Button
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 MULTIMEDIA
DIRECT TUNE
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
INFO
Press the Info button to display the current track
information. Press the X button to cancel this feature.
SETTING THE PRESETS
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the four Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit into memory, press and hold the desired
numbered button for more that two seconds or
until you hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of
the radio screen.
Pressing the All button on the radio home screen
will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
SIRIUSXM® SATELLITE RADIO MODE
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada). All fees and programming subject to
change. Our satellite service is available to those
at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and
D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area and
in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
MULTIMEDIA 93
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the
Radio is able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com or
call:
1-800-643-2112
Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) 1-800-387-9983
(French)
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and
replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 MULTIMEDIA
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed again by pressing the
Pause/Play button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is release.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
MULTIMEDIA 95
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the Favorites Menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This screen contains many submenus. You can exit
a submenu to return to a parent menu by pressing
the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll
the Channel List by pressing the Up and Down
arrows located on the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List;
the Radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites List and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites List.
You can scroll the Favorites List by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 MULTIMEDIA
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air List provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections List, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll List. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
AUDIO SETTINGS
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
MULTIMEDIA 97
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, or
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button and wait for the beep to say
a command. See some examples below.
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Media Operation
Media Mode is entered by pushing the Media
button located on the faceplate.
AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button and
the desired mode button. USB, AUX and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available. You
can select the Browse button to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can select the Source button, Play/Pause
button, or the Info button for artist information on
current song playing.
1 — Seek Down Button
2 — Seek Up Button
3 — Browse Button
4 — Source Button
5 — Play/Pause Button
6 — Info Button
7 — Next Button
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
MULTIMEDIA 99
SEEK UP/SEEK DOWN
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Right Arrow button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the track is within the first few
seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up /Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Right Arrow or Left Arrow
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode
will begin to fast forward or reverse through the
current track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
TRACK SELECTION (BROWSE)
Rotate the Browse button to scroll through and
select a desired track on the device or USB. Press
the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the browse function.
REPEAT
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat, press
the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second
time.
SHUFFLE
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB or Bluetooth®
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
INFO
Press the Info button to display the current track
information. Press the X button to cancel this
feature.
USB Mode
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Jump Drive cable into the USB port or by pushing
the Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select “USB”.
NOTE:
The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT
formatted USB devices. The system does not
support devices with a capacity higher than 64GB.
The system does not support USB hubs connected
to the USB port of the vehicle. Connect your multi-
media device directly to the USB port using the
specific connection cable for the device if
necessary.
Inserting USB Device
Gently insert the USB device into the USB port. If
you insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the
unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Album, Genre, Song, Playlist or Folder
from the USB device. Once the desired selection is
made, you can chose from the available media by
pressing the button on the touchscreen. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel
the browse function.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 MULTIMEDIA
Bluetooth® Mode
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system
Ú page 103.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the Media button located
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen and select
Bluetooth®.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen and
select AUX.
To insert an Auxiliary Device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Voice Commands Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and Auxiliary ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect
Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
MULTIMEDIA 101
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English)
800-387-9983 (French)
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone
allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired)
mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the phone mode and make calls,
show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view
phonebook, etc. When you press the button you
will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a
command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call or want to make
another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands
are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts.
There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All
Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the
VR button or Phone button on the radio faceplate.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
MULTIMEDIA 103
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters phone mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin
to search for Bluetooth® connections.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
tion request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the
higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect System.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, or confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within
range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest device paired will have the
higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
MULTIMEDIA 105
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect System to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect System.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the “Voice
Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 MULTIMEDIA
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect
Phone:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
MULTIMEDIA 107
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
Dial/Call.
RECENT CALLS
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
Calls without a reply
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Uconnect Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 MULTIMEDIA
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160
characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad, recent calls, SMS Inbox
or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call:
Ú page 108
To combine two calls: Ú page 108
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call button
the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
MULTIMEDIA 109
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa,
press the Transfer button on the Phone main
screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples below:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previous incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back to
confirm your requests. The system is designed to
keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the
wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
MULTIMEDIA 111
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system
Ú page 242.
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
OPERATING NAVIGATION MODE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Planning A Route
Using the search bar provides a wide range of ways
to find places and then navigate to them. You can
search for your destination in different ways:
A specific address
A partial address
A type of place
A zip code
A city to navigate to a city center
A Point of Interest (POI) near your current location
Latitude and longitude coordinates
Using Search
Press the Search button in the Main menu to
start searching. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard and the following buttons:
Navigation Search
1 — Back Button
2 — Search Box
3 — Type Of Search
4 — View Button
5 — 123?! Button
6 — Keyboard Layout Button
7 — List/Map Button
8 — Show/Hide Keyboard Button
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button Press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Search Box
Enter your search term in the search input box. As you type, matching
addresses and Points of Interests (POI) are shown.
Type Of Search
Press this button to change the type of search to any of the following:
Whole Map: Select this option to search your current map with no limit to
the search radius. Your current location is the center of the search. The
results are ranked by exact match.
Near Me: Select this option to search with your current GPS location as the
search center. The results are ranked by distance.
In Town or City: Select this option to use a town or city as the center of your
search. Enter the town or city name using the keyboard on the touchscreen.
When you have selected the town or city from the results list, you can search
for an address or POI in that city.
Along Route: When a route has been planned, you can select this option to
search along your route for a specific type of location, such as a POI cate-
gory. When prompted, enter the type of location and then select it in the
right-hand column to carry out the search.
Near Destination: When a route has been planned, you can select this
option to use your destination as the center of your search.
Latitude Longitude: Select this option to enter a pair of latitude and longi-
tude coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once you have used search, the last
search type you selected is used.
View Button Press this button to return to the Map View or Guidance View.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center
When planning a route to a city center, you can
search for a town, city, or postal code.
1. Enter the name of the city or town.
Searching For A City Center
2. Select the Points Of Interest tab.
Addresses List
3. Select the city center POI.
City Center
NOTE:
The city center location is shown on the map.
Show/Hide Keyboard Button Press this button to show or hide the keyboard.
List/Map Button
Select this button to switch between showing the results in a list or showing
the results on the map.
Keyboard Layout Button Press this button to change your keyboard layout to another language.
123?! Button
Press this button to use numbers and symbols on your keyboard. Select the
=\< button to toggle between the numbers and more symbols. Select the ABC
button to go back to the general keyboard.
Feature Description
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
4. Select “Drive”.
Drive Button
As soon as you start driving, the Guidance View is
shown automatically.
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI
You can search for a POI type, such as a restaurant
or tourist attraction. Alternatively, you can search
for a specific POI
Ú page 125.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
POI.
NOTE:
When searching, the whole map is selected. If you
want to change how the search is done, select the
button to the right of the search box. You can then
change where the search is done. For example,
along the route or in a city.
2. Select a POI category, such as “Restaurant”. If
you select a POI category, only POIs from that
category are shown. You can then select an
the desired POI. The location is shown on the
map.
3. To see more information about the POI, select
the POI on the map and then select the Pop-up
Menu button. Select “More Information” on
the pop-up menu.
4. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive button.
Drive Button
Planning A Route — Searching By Entering
Coordinates
1. Press the Search Type button.
2. Select “Latitude Longitude”.
3. Type in the pair of coordinates:
Decimal values
Degrees, minutes and seconds
GPS standard coordinates
4. Select a suggestion for the destination.
5. To plan a route, select the Drive button.
Planning A Route Using The Map
1. Move the map and zoom in until you can see
the desired destination.
2. Select the destination by pressing and holding
the screen for about one second.
NOTE:
A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
3. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive button.
Planning A Route Using My Places
1. Select the Main Menu button.
2. Select “My Places”.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to. For
example: Home.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
My Places
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the Drive
button.
Finding A Parking Lot
1. Press the Parking button from the Main
Menu.
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking lots
near your destination. If a route isn’t planned, the
map shows parking lots near your current location.
You also have an option to view the parking lots in
a list by pressing the Menu button.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
Find A Parking Lot
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot,
select the drive button.
Finding A Gas Station
1. Press the Main Menu button.
2. Select “Gas Station”.
NOTE:
You also have an option to view the gas stations in
a list by pressing the Menu button.
Find A Gas Station
3. Select a gas station from the map or the list. By
opening the pop-up menu, you can add the gas
station as a stop on your route. You can also
plan a route to your chosen gas station by
pressing the Drive button. Your system will
plan a route, and guidance to your destination
will begin. The Guidance View will be shown
automatically once you start driving.
Changing Your Route
MAKING CHANGES TO YOUR ROUTE
After planning a route, the route and destination
can be changed. There are various ways to change
the route without the need to completely replan
the entire journey.
To change the current route, press the Current
Route button in the main menu.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
CURRENT ROUTE MENU
Route Option Description
Clear Route
Press the button to clear the currently planned route. The Current Route Menu will close, and
the screen will return to the Map View.
Find Alternative
Press the button while driving on a planned route to show up to three alternative routes on the
Map View. Each alternative route shows the difference in travel time.
Select the chosen route by tapping on the time pop-up.
Press “Let’s GO”. Guidance to the destination will automatically begin, and the Guidance View
appears automatically as you begin driving.
Avoid Blocked Road
Press the button to avoid an unexpected obstacle that is blocking the road on the route. A new
route will be found that avoids blocked roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alternatives depending on the road network between you and
your destination.
The new route is shown on the Map View with the difference in travel time in a pop-up.
Select the new route by pressing the time pop-up. Guidance to your destination will resume
avoiding blocked roads, and the Guidance View will appear automatically as you begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative route around the blocked road if none exists.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
Avoid Part Of Road
Press the button to avoid part of the current route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to avoid. A pop-up menu will appear on the map showing
the location of the instruction.
To avoid the chosen section of the route, select “Avoid”. A new route is planned that will avoid the
chosen route sections, and the new route will appear in Map View.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the steps above. It may not be possible to find an alter-
native route around the section if none exists.
Avoid Toll Roads And More
Select the button to avoid some types of route features that are on your currently planned route.
These include ferries, toll roads and unpaved roads.
Show Instructions
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn instructions for the planned route.
The instructions include the following information:
Current location
Street names
Up to two road numbers shown in road signs (if available)
An instruction arrow
An instruction description
The distance between two consecutive instructions
Exit number
The full addresses of stops on your route
Route Option Description
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Add Stop To Route
Press the button to add a stop to the route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the map. In Map View, zoom in on the map and press
and hold to select a location. Then, select the pop-up menu button and press “Add to Current
Route”.
You route will be recalculated to include your stop.
Change Route Type
Press the button to change the type of route used to plan the route. The route will be
recalculated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Most Eco-Friendly Route
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the Settings menu.
Reorder Stops
Press the button to see the list of stops for your current route. You can change the order of the
stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the order of
your stops. The route will be recalculated with the stops in that changed order.
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from the route by pressing the Edit Stops button and then press the Delete
button. The stop will be removed from the route, and the route will be recalculated.
Pay Route or Track Preview
Press button to watch a preview of the planned route or track.
NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview
Press button to stop the preview of the planned route.
Route Option Description
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
Voice Command — If Equipped
ABOUT VOICE COMMAND
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control your
navigation system, you can use your voice to
control navigation.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say “2D
view”.
To view a list of available commands, press the
“Help” button in the Main menu and then press
“What can I say?”.
USING VOICE CONTROL
The following example shows how to use voice
control to plan a journey to your Home address:
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel to turn on the microphone.
A screen will pop up with examples of com-
mands.
NOTE:
Press the Help button in the Main menu then press
“What can I say?” to see a full list of commands.
2. When you hear a beep, say a command of your
choice. For example, you can say “Navigate home”.
NOTE:
For accurate results, speak normally without trying
to articulate words in an unnatural way. If there is
excessive road noise, for example, you may need
to speak directly into the microphone.
3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”.
NOTE:
If the command is incorrect, say “No” and repeat
the command after you hear the prompt and tone
again. Your navigation system plans a route from
your current location to your destination. To stop
your navigation system from listening out for
further commands, say “Cancel”.
Guidance View
The Guidance View is used to guide you along the
route to your destination. As soon as you start
driving, your Navigation system will immediately
start guiding you to your destination with spoken
instructions and visual instructions on the
touchscreen. You can also see your current
location and details along your route, including 3D
buildings in some cities. The Guidance View is
normally in 3D. To show a 2D map with the map
moving in your direction of travel, change the 2D
and 3D default settings
Ú page 123.
NOTE:
When you have planned a route and the 3D
Guidance View is shown, select the switch view
button to change to the Map View and use the
interactive features.
Guidance View
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
1 — Switch View Button
2 — Instruction Panel
3 — Route Bar
4 — Zoom Button
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Speed Panel
7 — Current Location
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Switch View Button
Select the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Guidance View.
Instruction Panel
Press this button to view the following information:
The direction of your next turn
The distance to your next turn
Lane guidance at some intersections
Route Bar
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned a route. The Route Bar
contains arrival information, such as the estimated time of arrival, the length
of drive time from your current location, and information about the next stop,
if you have stops on the route. The bottom of the Route Bar represents the
current location and shows the distance to the next stop on your route.
Current Location
This symbol shows the current location. By pressing the icon, the location will
be saved.
Speed Panel
Press the Speed Panel button to view the following information (if available):
The speed limit at your location
The name of the street you are driving on
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed Panel
turns red. If you drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed
Panel turns orange.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to show the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
Advanced Lane Guidance
NOTE:
Lane guidance is not available for all intersections
or in all countries.
Your navigation system helps you prepare for
highway exits and junctions by showing the correct
driving lane for your planned route.
As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the instruction
panel.
There are two types of lane guidance:
Lane images
Instructions in the status bar
Advanced Lane Guidance
Map View
The Map View is shown when you have no planned
route. You can use Map View the same way as you
might look at a traditional paper map. You can
move around the map using gestures, and zoom
using the zoom buttons. The map shows your
current location and many other locations such as
your My Places
Ú page 125.
Map View
1 — Back Button
2 — Switch View Button
3 — Zoom Button
4 — Main Menu Button
5 — Selected Locations
6 — Current Location
7 — Your Route
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button
Press the Back button to return to an overview of the route. If no route is
planned, pressing this button moves the map to put your current location at
the center.
Map Symbols
Symbols are used on the map to show the destination and saved places
Ú page 125.
Map symbols include:
Your destination
Your home location
A stop on your route
A location saved in My Places
Traffic Information — If Equipped
Select the Traffic Information button to display information about traffic
delays.
Selected Location
Press and hold the Selected Location button to select a location on the map.
Select the Pop-up Menu button to show options for the location, or select the
Drive button to plan a route to the location.
Current Location This symbol shows your current location on the map.
Your Route
If you have a planned route, it will appear on the map. You can select the route
to clear it, change the route type, add a stop, or save changes to your route
Ú page 115.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to open the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
Switch View Button
Press the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Guidance View.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
Voices
ABOUT VOICES
Your navigation system uses sound for some or all
of the following:
Driving directions
Warnings that you set
By selecting “Settings” in the main menu, then
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings for
how voice instructions are given. Instruction
settings include the following:
Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting
allows to you to hear early instructions. For
example, an early instruction could be, “After
two miles, take the exit right”.
Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether road
numbers are read out loud as part of navigation
instructions.
Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
road sign information is read out loud as part of
navigation instructions.
Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped): Use
this setting to control whether street names are
read out loud as part of navigation instructions.
Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
foreign street names are read out loud as part of
navigation instructions.
CHANGING THE VOLUME LEVEL
To change the volume of your navigation system,
use the Volume knob on the radio when an
instruction is being given.
Settings
ABOUT SETTINGS
You can change the way your navigation system
looks and behaves. Most of the settings on your
system can be accessed by pressing the Settings
button in the Main Menu.
APPEARANCE
To change how your navigation screen looks,
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From
here, you can change these features:
Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select this
setting to make your system automatically
switch to night colors when it gets dark.
Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
change how your system zooms in Guidance
View when you approach a turn or intersection.
Zooming in can make the turn or intersection
easier to drive. The following options are avail-
able:
Zoom in to next turn
Based on road type
None
ARRIVAL INFORMATION
In the settings menu, select “Arrival Information”
to change the following settings:
Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting to
show the remaining distance left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
show the remaining time left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Switch Between Distance And Time Automati-
cally: Select this setting to control the automatic
switching between remaining distance and
remaining time in the arrival information panel.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
SHOW ON ROUTE
In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to
see any of the following options in the route bar:
Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
on your route.
Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas
stations on your route.
Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.
SHOW PREVIEWS OF HIGHWAY EXITS
Select this setting to control the full screen preview
when you approach highway exits.
AUTOMATIC MAP VIEW SWITCHING
Automatic changing of views is on by default. For
example, when an alternative route is being
suggested, the map will automatically switch to
Map View, and when you start driving, your map
will automatically switch to Guidance View. You
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic
Map View Switching” in the settings.
AUTOMATIC ZOOM
Select this setting to control the full screen preview
when you approach highway exits.
GUIDANCE VIEW STYLE
Select this setting to choose between 3D and 2D
versions of the Guidance View. Both the 2D and 3D
Guidance Views move in your direction of travel.
In 3D Guidance View, you can choose to use the 3D
car icon or an arrowhead as the current location
indicator. By default, the 3D Guidance View shows
the 3D car icon.
VOICES SETTING
Select this setting to change how instructions are
read out loud
Ú page 123.
ROUTE PLANNING
Select this setting to control how your system plans
routes. The following options are available:
Always Take the Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to always default to the fastest
route.
Ask Me So I Can Choose
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to allow you to pick the route to
the destination.
Don’t Ask me
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to select the route to the destina-
tion.
Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to choose the fastest route to the
destination.
Shortest Route
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to choose the shortest route by
distance to the destination.
Most Eco-Friendly Route
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to choose the route that will
consume the least amount of energy.
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can choose whether you would like the navi-
gation system to avoid all highways while navi-
gating to the destination.
SOUNDS AND WARNINGS
Select this setting to change the following sounds
and warnings:
Warning Type: You can choose the type of warn-
ings you want to hear when you are driving:
Warning Sounds: Hear only warning sounds
None: No warning sounds are given
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
Safety Warnings: You can change settings for
whether you want to be warned, never warned,
or warned only if you are speeding. The following
options are available:
When speeding: This warning is given when
you exceed the speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). When you are speeding,
the speed panel also turns red in the Guid-
ance View.
Driver Safety: Select this setting to make
some features locked while the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE:
This feature increases safety by minimizing driver
distraction. When driver safety is on, a message
tells you when the lock is enabled.
SYSTEM
Select this setting to reset all other settings.
Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places and
settings and restore the standard settings. This
includes the language, voice settings, warning
settings, and theme.
NOTE:
This is not a software update and will not affect the
version of the software application installed on
your Uconnect system.
Points Of Interest
ABOUT POINTS OF INTEREST
Points Of Interest (POI) are useful places on the
map.
Here are some examples:
Restaurants
Hotels
Museums
Parking lots
Gas stations
Emergency Services
USING POIS TO PLAN A ROUTE
When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the
destination or as a stop along the route.
Using Search
1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin a
search. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
your desired destination. Your search results
will be displayed in two lists. Addresses and
city matches are shown in the list called
“Addresses.” POIs, types of POIs, and Places
are shown in the list called “Points of
Interest.” You can also select a POI category
to only see POI search results from that
category.
2. Select the desired POI. The location will appear
on the map. From here, you can save the POI
to “My Places,” use this POI as a starting point,
begin navigation to this destination, or view
more details about this POI. By pressing “More
Information,” you can view the phone number
and full address of the POI.
3. If a route is already planned, you can add the
location to your current route. To plan a route
to this destination, press the Drive button on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your Navigation system will calculate a route, and
guidance to your destination will begin. Guidance
View will begin as soon as you start driving.
My Places
ABOUT MY PLACES
My Places provides an easy way to select a
location without the need to enter the address or
search for the location. You can use My Places to
create a collection of useful or favorite addresses.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
The following items are always in My Places:
Home: Your home location can be your home
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate there.
Recent Destinations: Select this button to select
your destination from a list of locations you have
recently navigated to.
USING MY PLACES
You can use My Places as a way of navigating to a
place without having to enter the address. To
navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
follow these steps:
1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the main
menu, and press “My Places”.
2. Select the desired destination. The location
will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation to
this destination.
NOTE:
Your navigation system immediately starts guiding
you to your destination with spoken instructions
and visual instructions on the touchscreen.
ADDING A LOCATION TO MY PLACES
Adding From My Places
1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Add”.
Adding From My Places
3. To select a location, do one of the following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you want
to select. Press and hold to select the loca-
tion, then press the Add Location symbol.
Search for a location using the search func-
tion. Select “Show on Map,” then press the
Add Location symbol.
Adding A Location From The Map
1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in until
you can see the destination that you want to
navigate to.
2. Press and hold the point on the map to select
that location.
3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of the
name to open the pop-up menu.
4. Press “Add To My Places”.
Adding A Location To My Places
5. The name of the location will appear in the edit
screen. You can edit the name of the location
for easy recognition.
6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
Adding A Location Using Search
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”.
2. Enter the name or address of a location using
the touchscreen keyboard.
3. Select the desired location, and then press
“Show In Map”.
4. The Map View will show the location. Press the
pop-up menu button.
5. Press “Add to My Places”.
6. The name of the location will appear in the edit
screen. You can edit the name of the location
for easy recognition.
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
Setting Your Home Location
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Home”.
3. To select a location for home, do one of the
following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you want
to select. Press and hold to select the loca-
tion, then press the home icon next to
the name of the location.
You can also search for a location using the
search function. Select “Set Home Location.”
DELETING A LOCATION FROM MY PLACES
Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Recent Destinations”.
3. Press “Edit List”.
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
5. Press the Delete button.
Deleting A Location From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Edit List”.
3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
4. Press the Delete button.
Getting Help
Press the Help button in the Main menu or from the
Settings menu to see the following information:
About: Press the button to view information
about your Uconnect system. This information
includes:
Serial number
Application version
Installed maps
Legal information, such as Copyright and
Licenses for EULA and Open Source
Important Safety Notices And Warnings
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a
satellite-based system that provides location and
timing information around the globe. GPS is
operated and controlled under the sole
responsibility of the Government of the United
States of America, which is responsible for its
availability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS
availability and accuracy, or in environmental
conditions, may impact the operation of this
Navigation system. TomTom® does not accept any
liability for the availability and accuracy of GPS.
USE WITH CARE
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
means that you need to drive with due care and
attention.
SAFETY SETTINGS
We recommend using the safety settings to make
your driving as safe as possible. These are some of
the options included in the safety settings:
Show safety reminders
Warn when driving faster than allowed
You can also drive more safely by using voice
commands to control navigation
Ú page 123.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
Copyright Notices
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. TomTom®
and the "two hands" logo are registered
trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one of its
subsidiaries. Please see www.tomtom.com/
en_us/legal/ for warranties and end user license
agreements applying to this product.
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
material is proprietary and the subject of copyright
protection and/or database rights protection and/
or other intellectual property rights owned by
TomTom® or its suppliers. The use of this material
is subject to the terms of a license agreement. Any
unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material
will lead to criminal and civil liabilities.
Data Source © 2021 TomTom® All rights reserved.
The software included in this product contains
copyrighted software that is licensed under the
GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the
License section. You can obtain the complete
corresponding source code from us for a period of
three years after our last shipment of this product.
For more information, visit https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource or contact
your local TomTom® customer support team via
us.support.tomtom.com/app/answers/list. Upon
request, we will send you a CD with the
corresponding source code.
Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks of
Linotype GmbH registered in the US Patent and
Trademark Office and may be registered in certain
other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark of The
Monotype Corporation and may be registered in
certain jurisdictions.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the surface of the steering wheel.
Remote Sound System Controls
Pushing the top of the left-hand switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the Voice Recognition (VR) button below
the volume controls will begin your voice command
functions
Ú page 21.
The function of the right-hand control is different
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the right-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the right-hand switch will “Seek”
up for the next listenable station, and pushing the
bottom of the right-hand switch will “Seek” down
for the next listenable station.
Pushing the Phone pick-up button on top of the of
the Scan buttons will open a phone call. Pushing
the Phone hang-up button below the Scan buttons
will close a phone call.
PLAYER OPERATION
Pushing the switch up once will go to the next track
on the Player. Pushing the switch down once will go
to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while you
are on the go. You can log-in to view near real-time
and historical activity, including location, vehicle
heath, and driver performance.
Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles
Before you get started you will need:
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of each
vehicle you want to activate.
Your main user’s log-in and password; new
customers will be asked to register.
If you are a new customer, you will need
company credit card information or invoice
number as further proof of customer identifica-
tion. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/#login.
If you are an existing Verizon Connect customer,
enter your company’s log-in credentials. New
customers will need to register to create a new
account.
Manually enter the VIN(s) or upload a CSV file
with your VIN(s). A vehicle name is optional and
can be added later. Follow online instructions to
complete your vehicle entry.
Create a password and enter billing information.
An email will be sent to you to complete the final
step. After that, you will be ready to log-in and
access Verizon Connect Fleet!
You are good to go! You will receive an email
confirming your vehicles are now online.
For more information, or to learn more, visit
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
RAM TELEMATICS GENERAL
I
NFORMATION
Modification Statement
Magneti Marelli has not approved any changes or
modifications to this device by the user. Any
changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Magneti Marelli n'approuve aucune modification
apportée à l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en
soit la nature. Tout changement ou modification
peuvent annuler le droit d'utilisation de l'appareil
par l'utilisateur.
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and 27
of the FCC and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
5
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
RF Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition
aux rayonnements de la IC pour environnement
non contrôlé. L'antenne doit être installé de façon
à garder une distance minmale de 20 centimètres
entre la source de rayonnements et votre corps.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8 inch (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio
Ú page 242.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
131
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to
prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding
on slippery surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump
motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not
functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes. Placing the ignition in the
OFF mode and to the ON mode again may reset the
ABS if the fault detected was only momentary.
When you are in a severe braking condition
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the
base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
that the system is functioning properly.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Crosswind
Assist (CWA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). These systems
complement the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by
optimizing the vehicle braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Crosswind Assist (CWA)
CWA helps keep your vehicle from drifting out of its
lane due to unexpected crosswinds by means of
targeted braking of individual wheels. The system
will provide automatic stability assistance to
counteract the effect of strong side wind. If a
strong lateral wind is detected, front and rear
brakes on the affected side are applied, creating a
steering effect that mitigates the cross wind
influence. During system intervention, the driver
should perceive the natural stable handling feel of
the vehicle.
Crosswind Assist will activate automatically when
the vehicle reaches speeds above approximately
43 mph (70 km/h). When the system is activated,
the ESC Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
blink to warn the driver.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the above conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
ESC Operating Modes
ESC OFF Button Location
The ESC OFF button is located in the center switch
bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC
equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons
as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the
ESC OFF button.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of
ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in the
“Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without engine
torque management. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
Off” mode by pushing the ESC OFF button. Once
the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on
by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp-
erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-
tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces
the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is turned
to the ON mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver
when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA
will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver
applied for a short period of time after the driver
takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver
does not apply the throttle during this short period
of time, the system will release brake pressure and
the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to
move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
when the activation criteria have been met. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
the system will not activate and slight rolling may
occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
This indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator
light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off
the ESC or TCS.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and apply
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
the sway of the trailer.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded.
The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 68.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced, and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or
REVERSE and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system
can function properly. Do not block the taillights
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
Radar Sensor Locations
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
If the system detects degraded performance due
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
indicators in the side view mirrors will be on. The
warning indicators will remain illuminated until
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system, cycle
the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume
Ú page 139.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes
Ú page 242.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic, and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. For vehicles with auto-
matic transmission, after the end of the inter-
vention of automatic braking, the transmission
may remain in last gear stored — therefore the
vehicle could lurch forward, once the brakes
release a few seconds later. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated for the first
20 seconds from braking actuation.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled with the unavailable
screens
Ú page 242.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings
Ú page 79.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition position to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will maintain its status in the next
key cycle.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 79.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is “Only
Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible more distant collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If
the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays: “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, this
indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
“FCW Temporarily Unavailable” Warning
The “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” warning will be
displayed when conditions temporarily deactivate
the system. This most often occurs at times of poor
visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will show
“FCW Temporarily Unavailable” and the system will
deactivate.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
The “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message can
sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path, this warning may temporarily
occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the
driver should examine the fascia/bumper where
the radar is located. It may require cleaning or
removal of an obstruction from the fascia/bumper
cover.
NOTE:
If the “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message
occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use
solvents or abrasive pastes.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore
always pay particular attention, while maintaining
control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of
the vehicle, but that does not preside in the same
lane. In cases such as this, the system might
respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of
vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but placed
outside the field of action of the radar sensor and
could therefore not react in the presence of small
vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, while staying
in the traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the
field of action of the radar sensor, may cause the
intervention of the system.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
that crossed the range of the radar sensor in an
oncoming intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 210 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire
Ú page 242.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator
located in the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with
wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit
tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible
chime will be activated, and the “Check tire
pressure” message will display when one or more
of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected, an audible
chime will be activated and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Unavailable” message will display. If
the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS
Warning Light will turn off when the fault condition
no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any
of the following scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size spare
wheel.
1. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If a spare tire not equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor is used,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn on, flashing
for 75 seconds and then remaining solid for
each subsequent ignition key cycle.
3. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
NOTE:
For correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System
behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in
key-off during each tire substitution.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position
Ú page 159.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint
Ú page 159.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
Ú page 239 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
(Continued)
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at
their seating position to minimize the risk of
severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones
will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system
Ú page 162. The figure below
illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
Front Bucket Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Location
Front Bench Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV (START) or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system is
designed to inflate based on the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
WARNING!
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will
not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irri-
tation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose
or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irri-
tation continues, see your doctor. If these parti-
cles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off switch.
In the event of an accident, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Fuel Cut Off Switch may perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the
engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the hazard light button is pressed.
The hazard lights can be deactivated by
pressing the hazard light button.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power.
Unlock the power door locks.
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have
the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the
seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an
event push the “A” Button located underneath the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut
Off Switch to avoid the risk of fire. Before
resetting the Fuel Cut Off Switch, carefully check
for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights).
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial
Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as
a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying
children in the front passenger seat(s). Never
install rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle.
Although the seat belt can be locked to secure a
child restraint, there are no tether anchorages to
complete the proper installation of a
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a
child in a forward-facing child restraint, the
passenger seat should be moved to the full
rearward position and the child must be in a proper
restraint system based on its age, size and weight.
Follow the instructions below to secure the child
restraint using the seat belt.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. See the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
Ú page 151
for additional information on ALR.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air
bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to
infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 145.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check
for interference. If your floor mat interferes with
the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to
the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle
and place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
167
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P) or
REVERSE (R) for manual transmission.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat in a box, or next to or behind the
driver seat in a tool bag. The box and the tool bag
contain the same items.
Jack Kit Location
To release the jack kit from its storage location,
turn the lock knob a quarter turn counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
Lock Knob
To open the jack kit container, you must push the
container’s release to separate the top and
bottom.
Container Release
CAUTION!
Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to
lock knob may occur.
1 — Unlock Position
2 — Lock Position
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 169
Jacking Tools
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. Attach the lug bolt
adapter to the winch extension and insert it
into the winch mechanism.
Jack Tools
Winch Location
The winch mechanism is located under the
rear of the vehicle to the right of the spare tire.
Winch Extension
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
1 — Tow Eye
2 — Wrench Handle
3 — Lug Bolt Adapter
4 — Jack
5 — Reversible Tool
6 — Tool Handle
7 — Winch Extension
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Winch Extension
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Lowering Spare Tire
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Spare Tire
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Retainer
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and place an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the
wheel that is to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 171
Jack Warning Label
Assembled Jack
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body.
Jacking Engagement Locations
NOTE:
The rear jacking location is located in front of the
rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
Front Lifting Point
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
NOTE:
The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door.
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter
on the jack screw and turn clockwise until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described
location.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the wrench handle and lug
bolt adapter. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel
lug bolts.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 173
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw left
Ú page 232.
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
9. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with the
cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle.
10. Install the winch extension and
rotate the
wrench handle clockwise until the winch
mechanism operator hears “3 clicks” from the
device to indicate the wheel is properly stowed
under the vehicle.
11. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle
tools back in the storage compartment.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as
required.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
The center cap must be pushed out from the rear
to install the retainer and stow the tire.
WHEEL COVERS
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place
by the wheel lug bolts and can be removed after
the wheel lug bolts are taken off.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap
finish may occur.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger
seat or the driver side door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and
turn to this position for air pump oper-
ation only. Use the Black Air Pump
Hose (5) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (3) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
(1) once to turn on the Tire Service
Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (1) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (4)
and Sealant Hose (3) prior to the expiration date
(printed at the upper right hand corner on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system
Ú page 178.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3) are
a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 175
(Continued)
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two
needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (5) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(2) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items
to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire
Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hoses (3) and (5) to reach the valve stem and
keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in
this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual
transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF
position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to
the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
(3) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (1), the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (4)
through the Sealant Hose (3) and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (3)
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose (3) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (2) is in the Sealant Mode
position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (1) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running
before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose (3).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through
the Sealant Hose (3), the Pressure Gauge (8)
can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 177
Pressure Gauge (8) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire pressure label on the driver-side latch
pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of
the Sealant Bottle (4) and place the sticker on
the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (3)
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or
10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 176.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to
the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (8).
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in
sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the
vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant
contacting internal Tire Service Kit compo-
nents which may cause permanent damage to
the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire and loading information
label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) assembly at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible
Ú page 178.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand corner
of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (3) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the housing.
Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then push the bottle into the housing
by holding the button. An audible click will be
heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (3) and return the
hose to its storage area (located on top of the
housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 179
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are
located under the hood, in the engine
compartment on the driver's side.
The Remote Positive
(+) Post is covered with a
protective cap located on the side of the Front
Power Distribution Center.
The Remote Negative
(-) Post is located on the core
support closest to the front of the vehicle.
Jump Starting Locations
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
The remote positive
(+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver's side under the
cover of the Front Power Distribution Center.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
NOTE:
The remote negative
(-) post is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the driver's side.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery. Let the engine idle a few
minutes and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative end
(-) of the jumper
cable from the remote negative
(-)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
BATTERY LOCATION
There are two remote jump starting posts under
the hood which is the recommended jump start
location. If access to the battery is needed, an
access panel on the driver’s side floor will allow for
battery access.
Access Panel
Battery Location
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 181
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the gear selector override access
cover which is located below the gear selector.
Gear Selector Release Cover
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port, and push and hold the override
release lever forward.
Release Lever
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access
cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Shift back
and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control System (ESC) in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 132.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
switch again to restore “ESC ON” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK (P) for towing
Ú page 181.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground ALL Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
7
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
towed (with front wheels on the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km), tow with the front
wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 157.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú page 158.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front
wheels on the ground can cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
185
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 41.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering and
fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 187
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Inspect the cabin air filter, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Replace the Brake Fluid every two
years.
1
X X X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs.
2
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
X X
Inspect and replace the PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 189
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out any residual
water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of
fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Never smoke while working in the engine
compartment: gas and inflammable vapors
may be present, with the risk of fire.
Be very careful when working in the engine
compartment when the engine is hot: you may
get burned. Do not get too close to the radiator
cooling fan: the electric fan may start; danger
of injury. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing
might be pulled by moving parts.
CAUTION!
Be careful not to confuse the various types of
fluids while topping up: they are not compatible
with each other! Topping up with an unsuitable
fluid could severely damage your car.
The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
Always top up using engine oil of the same
specifications as that already in the engine.
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
engine to cool down before loosening the filler
cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminium
cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
(Continued)
After the engine has warmed, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
cold windshield. Mopar® All Weather Windshield
Washer Solution or equivalent, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action,
reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 178.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do
not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the API. The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 186.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 193
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized
dealer or other service facilities using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter for
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 186.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in
the engine compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter
retainer to the fresh air inlet, and remove the
filter retainer.
Accessing Air Filter
2. Remove and replace the cabin air filter from
the filter retainer.
Removing Air Filter
3. Install the cabin air filter/filter retainer back
into the fresh air inlet. When installing the filter
retainer make sure the retainer is fully
engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly
to secure the filter retainer to the fresh air
inlet.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — Cabin Air Filter
3 — Cabin Air Filter Retainer
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you
Ú page 166.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those materials that
come into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS-12106) only by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 186.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead and turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON mode.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 237.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
The vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming
to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene
glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically
Ú page 186.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood service
or immediately if the brake system warning lamp
indicates system failure. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes the fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake linings
wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted
Ú page 237.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified
transmission fluid
Ú page 238. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended
brake fluid
Ú page 237. Using the wrong type
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or complete
brake failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder, and will require more
frequent fluid and filter changes
Ú page 238.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission filler tube is
capped and no dipstick is provided. An authorized
dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid
leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 186.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems, (engine system, transmission
system) steering system or Body Control
Module (BCM) blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
WARNING!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment. To
access the fuses, remove the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
Removal of the two cover screws is necessary
before accessing the fuses.
Fuse Access Cover Screw Location
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 40 Amp Orange – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02
20 Amp Yellow (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
– Starter Relay 3.6L (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F04
50 Amp Red (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
–
Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC) (Trans Power
Relay, Vacuum Pump, KL30 for the Shifter Transmission
Module [STM]) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F06
40 Amp Orange (non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F07
50 Amp Red (non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown
KL15 Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6), KL15
Starter Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow
Engine Control Module (ECM), Injectors (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown
KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM), KL30 Main Relay Coil
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor *
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow
Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition Coils (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum Pump Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine) *
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the front
PDC Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F61 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F66 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM – TPCU – RRM – DLC)
F37 5 Amp Beige INT (BRAKE NO – IPC)
F38 15 Amp Blue Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM – SAS – BRAKE NC) / DASM
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (PAM – CCS – RRM – ECM)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 5 Amp Beige INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX) / HALF-DRVM-BSD
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC) + FTM
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Lamp
F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Lamp
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the
interior side at the base of the passenger side
B-pillar.
Fuse Panel Location
Fuse Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) *
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) *
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Dome Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Cargo Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7SLL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 207
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
HEADLAMPS LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect harness
electrical connector and remove the headlamp
assembly from vehicle.
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back
of the headlamp housing.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the socket.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
9. Pull bulb outward from socket.
10. Install new bulb.
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks
back into place.
12. Install access cap.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
14. Install one upper retaining screw on the
headlamp housing.
15. Install two lower retaining screws on the
headlamp housing.
16. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
17. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove the
headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
9. Install the one upper retaining screw on
headlamp housing.
10. Install the two lower retaining screws on
headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
12. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP (DRL)/FRONT SIDE
MARKER LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove the
headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Remove the (DRL), side marker bulb by pulling
straight out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
10. Install the one upper retaining screw on the
headlamp housing.
11. Install the two lower retaining screws on the
headlamp housing.
12. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
13. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on
the wheel liner.
FRONT, REAR ROOF LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp
assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counter-
clockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise
to lock in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP, TURN SIGNAL AND
REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the seven (7) fasteners from the rear
access cover and remove cover to gain access
to the Tail lamp assembly fasteners.
Rear Access Cover
3. Remove the two (2) 17mm tail light assembly
fasteners.
4. Disconnect the tail light harness connector
and remove tail light assembly from the
vehicle.
5. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and
rear side marker bulb/socket by rotating
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
7. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to
lock in place.
8. Reinstall lamp.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
CARGO LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Using a suitable tool, remove either the lamp
above the back door or the sliding door lamp
as needed and disconnect it.
Rear Cargo Lamp Bulb Access
2. Using a suitable tool, pull open the metal bulb
access on the back of the housing.
Cargo Lamp Bulb Location
3. Remove and install the replacement bulb.
4. Close the bulb access, connect the lamp and
install the lamp into place.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DOME LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Using a suitable tool, insert the tip at the
location shown and press inward to the lamp
to relieve the spring tension. This will allow
you to easily drop the dome lamp assembly
from its bracket and disconnect the lamp.
Dome Lamp Assembly Location
2. Using a suitable tool, flex the housing to lift the
light pod cover away from the unit.
Dome Lamp Light Pod Cover
3. Remove and replace the bulbs as needed.
Dome Lamp Light Bulbs
4. Close the housing cover making sure it snaps
together properly and connect the lamp.
5. Install overhead console into place making
sure to seat the assembly’s forward end first
and then snapping it flush so that the tension
spring is fully seating in the housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
1 — Spring Tension Relief Access
2 — Dome Lamp Assembly
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 67.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing
Ú page 67.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lb (392 kg).
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
is changed after driving with under-inflated tire
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle for further
information
Ú page 182.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in
existing tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 212.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 72.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a tire pressure
monitor sensor.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a tire pressure
monitor sensor.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss
of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/
h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to
be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)(Continued)
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance the following traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
All Front
LT225/75R16E
225/75R16C
Quality Chain Corp Light Truck
Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire chain
or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION!
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
Ú page 186. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting prior to storing. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather, and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
C
UPHOLDERS
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer
starting at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may
follow the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water
and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let
soak for approximately 30 minutes. After
30 minutes, pull the liner from the water and dip it
back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly
under warm running water. Shake the excess
water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with
a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push
the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat
into the corresponding openings in the drawer.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
8
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems
loses normal capability, the remaining system will
still function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake System Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
145 Ft-Lb
(197 N·m)
M16 x 1.50 21 mm
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 233
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded regular gasoline having a posted octane
number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of higher octane premium gasoline is not
required, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 235
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
9
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 237
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use Only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend
Mopar® ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 4. DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed
every two years regardless of mileage.
Power Steering Reservoir
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-11655.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
239
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
10
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 241
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
For French, refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts and accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
10
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
TMB2
The following regulatory statement applies to
TMB2 devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: Y70VP2REFRESH
IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH
CANADA
Model SRR3-B
Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada's RSS -
310. Operation is subject to the condition that this
device must not cause harmful interference and
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device .
Cet appareil est conforme au RSS - 310 d 'Industrie
Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis à la
condition que cet appareil ne provoque pas
d'interférences nuisibles et accepte toute
interférence, y compris les interférences
susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement
indésirable de l'appareil
US
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and the body of any persons, user or
bystander.
FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
243
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............197
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................190
Additives, Fuel ...............................................234
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................109
Air Bag ...........................................................153
Air Bag Operation ......................................154
Air Bag Warning Light................................152
Enhanced Accident Response...................184
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................184
If Deployment Occurs................................157
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............158
Maintenance .............................................158
Side Air Bags .............................................154
Transporting Pets......................................164
Air Bag Light ..................................44, 152, 164
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)..192
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................193
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................193
Air Conditioner System ..................................193
Air Conditioning Filter .............................33, 193
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 32, 33
Air Filter .........................................................192
Air Pressure
Tires ..........................................................219
Alarm
Security Alarm ......................................13, 46
Alarm System
Security Alarm .............................................13
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 197, 236
Disposal ................................................... 198
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 131
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................48
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 134
Audio Settings..................................................96
Audio Systems (Radio).....................................78
Auto Down Power Windows .............................37
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................37
Automatic Door Locks......................................14
Automatic Transmission .........................54, 200
Adding Fluid.............................................. 200
Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 200
Fluid Change ............................................ 200
Fluid Level Check ............................ 199, 200
Fluid Type ........................................ 199, 238
Special Additives ...................................... 199
AUX Cord..........................................................34
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 136
B
Battery ................................................... 44, 191
Charging System Light.................................44
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................11
Belts, Seat .................................................... 164
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 136
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 104
Body Builders Guide...........................................7
Body Mechanism Lubrication........................ 194
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 215
Brake Assist System ..................................... 132
Brake Control System, Electronic.................. 132
Brake Fluid...........................................199, 238
Brake System.......................................199, 232
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 131
Fluid Check............................................... 199
Master Cylinder ........................................ 199
Parking ........................................................53
Warning Light...............................................45
Brake, Parking .................................................53
Brake/Transmission Interlock..........................55
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 206
Bulbs, Light ..........................................165, 206
11
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244
C
Camera, Rear .................................................. 65
Capacities, Fluid ............................................236
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................................................. 66
Oil (Engine)................................................189
Power Steering............................................60
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................198
Car Washes ...................................................229
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................166
Cargo Area Cover............................................. 38
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 38
Cargo Light ...................................................... 27
Cellular Phone ...............................................130
Certification Label ........................................... 67
Change Oil Indicator ........................................ 41
Changing A Flat Tire.......................................167
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................212
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)... 51
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................163
Checks, Safety...............................................163
Child Restraint...............................................159
Child Restraints
Booster Seats............................................161
Child Seat Installation ...............................163
Infant And Child Restraints .......................160
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........161
Clean Air Gasoline .........................................234
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 225
Climate Control ................................................30
Manual ........................................................30
Rear.............................................................32
Cold Weather Operation ..................................52
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 223
Contract, Service .......................................... 240
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 198
Cooling System ............................................. 196
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 197
Coolant Level................................... 196, 198
Cooling Capacity....................................... 236
Disposal Of Used Coolant......................... 198
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 196
Inspection................................................. 198
Points To Remember................................ 198
Pressure Cap............................................ 198
Radiator Cap ............................................ 198
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................197, 236, 237
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 228
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ........................60
Cruise Light......................................................49
Cupholders ................................................... 231
Customer Assistance .................................... 239
Customer Programmable Features..................79
Cybersecurity ...................................................78
D
Dealer Service............................................... 191
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 164
Deleting A Phone........................................... 105
Diagnostic System, Onboard............................50
Dimmer Control Switch ....................................28
Dimmer Switch
Headlight .....................................................26
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ........................... 200
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 190
Power Steering ............................................60
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 183
Disconnecting ............................................... 105
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 198
Disturb .......................................................... 107
Door Ajar ..........................................................45
Door Ajar Light .................................................45
Door Locks.......................................................13
Automatic ....................................................14
Doors ...............................................................13
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................16
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .......................................76
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
245
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................132
Electric Remote Mirrors...................................24
Electrical Power Outlets...................................35
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)........ 60
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................132
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 45
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................182
Jacking ......................................................167
Jump Starting............................................178
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 51
Engine ...........................................................189
Air Cleaner.................................................192
Block Heater ............................................... 53
Break-In Recommendations........................ 53
Checking Oil Level.....................................190
Compartment ............................................189
Compartment Identification ......................189
Coolant (Antifreeze)......................... 196, 237
Cooling ......................................................196
Exhaust Gas Caution.................................166
Fails To Start ...............................................52
Flooded, Starting.........................................52
Fuel Requirements.......................... 233, 236
Jump Starting............................................178
Oil........................................... 192, 236, 237
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................189
Oil Filter.....................................................192
Oil Selection .................................... 192, 236
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 192
Overheating.............................................. 181
Starting........................................................52
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ......... 184
Entry System, Illuminated ................................29
Ethanol ......................................................... 234
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 166
Exhaust System ................................... 166, 195
Exterior Lights.........................................25, 165
F
Filters
Air Cleaner................................................ 192
Air Conditioning ..................................33, 193
Engine Oil ........................................ 192, 237
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 192
Flashers
Hazard Warning........................................ 167
Turn Signals .......................................49, 165
Flat Tire Changing................................ 210, 223
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 210, 223
Flooded Engine Starting...................................52
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 236
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 165
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ........................... 200
Brake........................................................ 199
Cooling System ......................................... 196
Engine Oil ................................................. 190
Power Steering ............................................60
Fog Lights ........................................................26
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................16
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 139
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 167
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 182
Fuel............................................................... 233
Additives................................................... 234
Clean Air ................................................... 234
Ethanol ..................................................... 234
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................................66
Gasoline ................................................... 233
Materials Added ....................................... 234
Methanol .................................................. 234
Octane Rating.................................. 233, 237
Requirements.................................. 233, 236
Tank Capacity ........................................... 236
Fuses ............................................................ 200
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)...........................66, 67
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 234
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 234
Gear Ranges ....................................................56
Gear Selector Override.................................. 181
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 231
11
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246
Gross Axle Weight Rating.......................... 67, 69
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................... 67, 68
Guide
Body Builders ................................................ 7
GVWR .............................................................. 67
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ....................................... 76
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................167
Head Restraints............................................... 20
Headlights
Cleaning ....................................................229
High Beam ..................................................26
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......... 26
Passing........................................................26
Switch ......................................................... 25
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 25
Heated Seats................................................... 19
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 53
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch.............................................. 26
Hill Start Assist ..............................................134
Hitches
Trailer Towing.............................................. 70
Hood Prop........................................................ 38
Hood Release .................................................. 38
I
Ignition.............................................................12
Key .......................................................10, 12
Switch..........................................................12
Ignition Key Removal .......................................12
Illuminated Entry..............................................29
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)..................................11
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................22
Instrument Cluster....................................39, 49
Descriptions ................................................40
Display..................................................40, 42
Display Controls...........................................41
Menu Items .................................................42
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 231
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................27
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 230
Interior Lights...................................................27
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................29
iPod/USB/MP3 Control....................................34
J
Jack Location................................................ 167
Jack Operation.............................................. 167
Jacking And Tire Changing............................ 167
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ........ 167
Jump Starting ............................................... 178
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............11
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................11
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..11
Key-In Reminder ..............................................12
Keys .................................................................10
Replacement ...............................................11
Sentry (Immobilizer).....................................11
L
Lane Change Assist..........................................26
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 147
Latches ......................................................... 165
Hood............................................................38
Lead Free Gasoline....................................... 233
Leaks, Fluid................................................... 165
Life Of Tires................................................... 221
Light Bulbs ...........................................165, 206
Lights ............................................................ 165
Air Bag ...................................... 44, 152, 164
Brake Assist Warning................................ 134
Brake Warning.............................................45
Bulb Replacement .................................... 206
Collision Warning.........................................49
Cruise ..........................................................49
Daytime Running .........................................25
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
247
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.................... 25, 26
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator..................................45, 47, 134
Exterior...............................................25, 165
Hazard Warning Flasher............................167
Headlights................................................... 25
High Beam ..................................................26
Illuminated Entry ......................................... 29
Instrument Cluster ...................................... 49
Interior ........................................................ 27
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......... 48
Park...................................................... 26, 49
Passing........................................................26
Seat Belt Reminder..................................... 44
Security Alarm ............................................. 46
Service ......................................................206
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)...............143
Tow Haul .....................................................49
Traction Control.........................................134
Turn Signals ................................25, 49, 165
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions..................................... 45, 49
Loading Vehicle ........................................ 67, 68
Capacities ................................................... 68
Tires ..........................................................215
Locks
Automatic Door .................................... 13, 14
Low Tire Pressure System .............................143
Lubrication, Body.......................................... 194
Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 232
M
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 191
Maintenance Schedule................................. 185
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....48
Manual
Service ..................................................... 241
Methanol ...................................................... 234
Mirrors .............................................................22
Electric Remote ...........................................24
Exterior Folding............................................24
Heated.........................................................25
Outside........................................................23
Rearview......................................................22
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................... 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 143
Mopar Parts .................................................. 241
MP3 Control.....................................................34
Multi-Function Control Lever............................25
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................53
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 145
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 233
Oil Change Indicator.........................................41
Reset ...........................................................41
Oil Filter, Change........................................... 192
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 192
Oil Pressure Light.............................................46
Oil, Engine............................................192, 237
Capacity.................................................... 236
Checking................................................... 190
Dipstick..................................................... 190
Disposal.................................................... 192
Filter ................................................ 192, 237
Filter Disposal........................................... 192
Identification Logo .................................... 192
Materials Added To................................... 192
Pressure Warning Light................................46
Recommendation ............................ 192, 236
Synthetic................................................... 192
Viscosity.................................................... 236
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................50
Operating Precautions .....................................50
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 241
Outside Rearview Mirrors..........................22, 23
Overheating, Engine...................................... 181
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 228
Parking Brake ..................................................53
ParkSense System, Rear..................................62
Passing Light....................................................26
11
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248
Personal Settings ............................................ 43
Pets ...............................................................164
Phone Mode ..................................................100
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........215
Power
Mirrors......................................................... 24
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 35
Steering....................................................... 60
Windows...................................................... 36
Power Steering Fluid......................................238
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................150
Preparation For Jacking.................................167
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................220
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............198
Radio Operation ............................................130
Rear Camera ................................................... 65
Rear Cross Path.............................................138
Rear ParkSense System .................................. 62
Rearview Mirror ...............................................22
Recreational Towing ........................................ 75
Reformulated Gasoline..................................234
Refrigerant ....................................................193
Release, Hood ................................................. 38
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................146
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 11
Replacement Bulbs .......................................206
Replacement Keys...........................................11
Replacement Tires........................................ 222
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 241
Restraints, Child ........................................... 159
Restraints, Head..............................................20
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 227
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 164
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 165
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 241
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 210
Safety Tips .................................................... 163
Safety, Exhaust Gas...................................... 166
Satellite Radio .................................................92
Schedule, Maintenance................................ 185
Seat Belts ............................................ 146, 164
Adjustable Shoulder Belt.......................... 149
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..... 149
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..149
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........... 151
Child Restraints........................................ 159
Energy Management Feature ................... 151
Front Seat...............................146, 147, 148
Inspection................................................. 164
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 148
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 149
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 147
Operating Instructions.............................. 148
Pregnant Women...................................... 150
Rear Seat.................................................. 147
Reminder.................................................. 146
Untwisting Procedure................................ 149
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 230
Seats................................................................16
Adjustment ..................................................16
Heated.........................................................19
Rear Folding ................................................16
Tilting...........................................................16
Security Alarm...........................................13, 46
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 237
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................11
Service Assistance ........................................ 239
Service Contract............................................ 240
Service Manuals ........................................... 241
Settings
Personal ......................................................79
Settings, Audio.................................................96
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 181
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 147
Signals, Turn .......................................... 49, 165
Sirius Satellite Radio........................................92
Favorites......................................................95
Replay..........................................................93
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM.............................................95
Favorites......................................................95
Replay..........................................................93
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
249
Snow Chains (Tire Chains).............................226
Snow Tires.....................................................223
Spare Tires .......................................... 223, 224
Starting............................................................ 52
Automatic Transmission.............................. 52
Button ......................................................... 12
Cold Weather .............................................. 52
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 52
Steering ........................................................... 15
Column Lock ............................................... 15
Power .......................................................... 60
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................128
Storage, Vehicle......................................33, 228
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................228
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag.....153
Sway Control, Trailer......................................135
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 7
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................192
T
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 15
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........215
Tire Markings.................................................211
Tire Safety Information ..................................210
Tire Service Kit .........173, 174, 176, 177, 178
Tires...................................165, 219, 223, 227
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................221
Air Pressure...............................................219
Chains ...................................................... 226
Changing .................................................. 167
Compact Spare......................................... 223
General Information ........................ 219, 223
High Speed............................................... 220
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 219
Jacking ..................................................... 167
Life Of Tires .............................................. 221
Load Capacity.................................. 215, 216
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..46, 143
Quality Grading......................................... 227
Radial ....................................................... 220
Replacement ............................................ 222
Rotation.................................................... 227
Safety .............................................. 210, 219
Sizes......................................................... 212
Snow Tires................................................ 223
Spare Tires ...................................... 223, 224
Spinning ................................................... 221
Trailer Towing ..............................................72
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 221
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 232
To Open Hood ..................................................38
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................71
Torque Converter Clutch ..................................59
Towing.................................................... 68, 183
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 183
Guide ...........................................................71
Recreational ................................................75
Weight .........................................................71
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...........................75
Traction............................................................76
Traction Control ............................................ 135
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 135
Trailer Towing...................................................68
Hitches ........................................................70
Minimum Requirements ..............................71
Tips..............................................................74
Trailer And Tongue Weight...........................71
Wiring ..........................................................73
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................71
Trailer Weight...................................................71
Transmission
Automatic .......................................... 54, 199
Fluid.......................................................... 238
Maintenance ............................................ 199
Transmission Fault Warning Light ....................45
Transporting Pets.......................................... 164
Tread Wear Indicators................................... 221
Trip Computer ..................................................43
Turn Signals .....................................................49
11
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features..................................106
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone....................................109
Uconnect Phone ......................... 102, 103, 104
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress......................107
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................107
Bluetooth Communication Link.................111
Call Continuation.......................................108
Call Controls..............................................106
Call Termination ........................................108
Cancel Command......................................102
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................104
Help Command .........................................102
Join Calls ...................................................108
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite..............................................105
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ........................................108
Managing Your Favorites...........................106
Natural Speech .........................................102
Operation ..................................................102
Overview....................................................100
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 103
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device.... 104
Phonebook Download .............................. 105
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 108
Power-Up .................................................. 111
Recent Calls ............................................. 107
Redial ....................................................... 108
To Remove A Favorite............................... 106
Toggling Between Calls............................. 108
Touch-Tone Number Entry........................ 107
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....109
Voice Command ....................................... 109
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .............79
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 227
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 233
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 149
USB..................................................................34
V
Vehicle Certification Label ...............................67
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 232
Vehicle Loading ...............................67, 68, 216
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 7
Vehicle Storage.......................................33, 228
Voice Command...............................................21
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................21
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................48
Warning Lights And Messages .........................44
Warranty Information .................................... 241
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 190
Washing Vehicle............................................ 229
Water
Driving Through ...........................................76
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 225
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 225
Wind Buffeting .................................................37
Window Fogging...............................................33
Windows ..........................................................36
Power...........................................................36
Windshield Defroster .................................... 164
Windshield Washers .............................. 29, 190
Fluid.............................................................29
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 195
Windshield Wipers ...........................................29
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 195
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................29
21_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om
(U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition V1
21_VF_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
